Philips AZ 1500 User Manual

POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of pur chase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered pr oof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , r enewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized r epair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O . Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de pr ovoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce produit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: P our éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene der ec ho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRICA O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantag e of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batteries correctly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles correctement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, P ar t 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce produit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRICA O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, P ar t 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce pr oduit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of ev er yone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance pr oblems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce pr oduit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of ev er yone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance pr oblems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce produit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRICA O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance pr oblems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, P ar t 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce pr oduit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentr o de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, P ar t 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce produit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, P ar t 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce pr oduit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of ev er yone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance pr oblems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce pr oduit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRICA O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance pr oblems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce produit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des pr oblèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentr o de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce pr oduit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des problèmes de f onctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRICA O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance pr oblems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce produit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des pr oblèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentr o de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce pr oduit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des pr oblèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRICA O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance pr oblems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1
POR T ABLE AUDIO One Y ear Free Exchange This product m ust be carried in for an exchange. LIMITED WARRANTY WHO IS CO VERED? Y ou must hav e proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that y ou purchased the pr oduct is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’ s manual and keep both nearb y . WHA T IS CO VERED? W arranty coverage begins the da y you buy your product. For one year ther eafter , a defective or inoperativ e product will be replaced with a new , renewed or comparable product at no charge to y ou. A replacement pr oduct is cover ed only for the original warranty period. When the warranty on the original product expir es, the warranty on the replacement pr oduct also expires. WHA T IS EXCLUDED? Y our warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the pr oduct, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product r epair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips Consumer Electr onics Company . • reception pr oblems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that r equires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approv ed and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting fr om the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion ma y not apply to you. This includes, but is not limited to, prer ecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commer cial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE A V AILABLE? Y ou may exchange the pr oduct in all countries where the product is officially distributed b y Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y . In countries where Philips Consumer Electronics Compan y does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement pr oduct (although there ma y be a delay if the appropriate pr oduct is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner’ s manual bef ore r equesting an exchange. Adjustments of the controls discussed there ma y sav e you a trip. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U .S.A., PUER TO RICO OR U .S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact your dealer to arrange an exchange. Or , ship the product, insured and freight pr epaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below . Small Product Service Center Philips Service Company 907 Snapps Ferry Road, Plant 2, Building 6 Greeneville, TN 37743 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty . But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty ma y last, this limitation may not apply to y ou.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANAD A... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-363-7278 (English Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of mer chantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any cir cumstances for any dir ect, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurr ed, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) T O GET OUT -OF-W ARRANTY EXCHANGE... In U.S.A., Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, contact Philips Service Company at (800) 531-0039 to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. Then carefull y pack the product and ship it to the Small Product Service Center (address listed above). In Canada, call the phone number listed above under “Exchanging a Product in Canada” to obtain the cost of out- of-warranty exchange. REMEMBER... Please record the model and serial n umbers found on the product below . Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card pr omptly . It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary . MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ EL6095T002 / MAC5433 / 1-97 This warranty gives you specif ic legal r ights. Y ou may have other r ights which var y from state/province to state/pr ovince. Philips Ser vice Solutions Group, P .O. Box 2976, Longview, Texas 75606, (903) 242-4800 • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéf icient les possesseurs des produits Philips . • Remplissez et ren voyez votr e car te d’enregistrement de gar antie jointe à votre appareil sans tar der et vous béné- ficier ez de ces avantages impor tants . Renvo y ez votr e car te d’enr egistrement de garantie pour vous assur er de r ecevoir tous les a vantages auxquels vous a v ez dr oit. Vérification de garantie Enregistr ez votre pr oduit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votr e droit à une protection maxim um selon les termes et les conditions de votr e garantie Philips. Confirmation de possession V otre carte d’enreg- istrement de garantie prouv e que vous possédez l’appar eil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Enr egistr ement du modèle Renv oyez v otre carte d’en- registr ement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour v ous assur- er de rece voir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels v ous a vez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matéri- au non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de prov oquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas r etirer le boîtier de ce produit. Le « point d’exclamation » attire v otre attention sur des sujets risquant de pro voquer des pr oblèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si v ous ne lisez pas les infor- mations s’y reportant. D ANGER: NE P AS EXPOSER CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. A TTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, intr oduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne corr espondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le n uméro de série situé à l’arrièr e du bloc. Conser vez cette information pour v ous y reporter à l’a venir . N ° de modèle __________________ N ° de série ____________________ MAC5097 Connaissez ces symboles de s s é é c c u u r r i i t t e e ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE P AR L ’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. • Una vez que se registr e la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la T arjeta de Registro de la Gar antía empacada con su aparato y saque pro vec ho de estas ventajas impor tantes . En vie ho y su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía para r ecibir todas las v entajas corr espondientes. V erificación de la garantía Registre su pr oducto den- tro de 10 días para confir- mar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los térmi- nos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Confirmación del dueño Su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de r obo o pérdida del pr oducto. Registr o del modelo La dev olución inmediata de su T arjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la inf ormación y todas las promociones especiales que le corr e- sponden por ser el dueño de su modelo . El símbolo del «ra yo» indica que algún material no aislado dentr o de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, fa vor de no remo ver la cubierta del producto . El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a carac- terísticas sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar pr oblemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento . AD VER TENCIA: P ARA EVT AR EL RIESGO DE SA CUDID A ELECTRIC A O INCENDIO , NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMED AD . PRECA UCION: Para evitar sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. P ara uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior . Guarde esta información para el futur o. No . de modelo _________________ No . de serie ___________________ MAC5097 Conozca estos simbolos de s e g u r i d a d PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARA TONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARA TO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. • Once your Philips purc hase is registered, you’ re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips pr oduct. • So complete and return the W arranty Registration Car d enc losed with your purchase at once , and tak e advantage of these impor tant benefits. Return y our W arranty Registration card toda y to ensur e y ou receiv e all the benefits y ou’ re entitled to . W arranty V erification Registering your pr oduct within 10 da ys confirms your right to maxim um protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips war ranty . Owner Confirmation Y our completed W arranty Registration Card serves as verification of o wner- ship in the ev ent of prod- uct theft or loss. Model Registration Returning your W arranty Registration Card right a way guarantees y ou’ll receiv e all the information and special offers which you qualify f or as the owner of y our model. This “bolt of lightning” indi- cates uninsulated material within your unit which ma y cause an electrical shock. For the safety of e veryone in y our household, please do not remo ve product co vering. The “exclamation point” calls attention to featur es for which you should r ead the enclosed literature closel y to prev ent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING: T O PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD , DO NO T EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT T O RAIN OR MOISTURE. CA UTION: T o prev ent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. F or Customer Use Enter below the Serial No . which is locat- ed on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for futur e refer ence. Model No . ______________________ Serial No . _______________________ MAC5097 Know these s s a a f f e e t t y y symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento . Symbole d’ un appar eil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. 1. Lea estas instrucciones. 2. Conser ve estas instrucciones. 3. Lea todos los avisos. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del a gua. 6. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco . 7. No tape las aperturas de venti- lación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como r adiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplif icadores) generador de calor . 9. No anule la seguridad de la cla vija de corri- ente (ya sea de tipo polarizado o con toma de tier r a). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierr a tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierr a. T anto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierr a han sido incorpor adas a la clavija para su segur i- dad per sonal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corr iente , consulte a un elec- tricista par a sustituir la toma de cor r i- ente obsoleta. 10 . Proteja debidamente el cab le impidiendo que pueda pisar se o inclu- so perforar se , especialmente en la par te más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. 11 . Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomenda- dos por el fabricante . 12 . C oloque el equipo exclusi- vamente sobre aquellos car- ros, bases, trípodes, sopor tes o mesas especificados por el com- erciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo par a evi- tar posibles daños por vuelco . 13 . Desenchufe el aparato durante tor- mentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante lar go tiempo. 14 . Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico espe- cializado. El equipo deberá repar ar se siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la cla vija, por der- rame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido intro- ducir se en su inter ior , por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húme- dos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubier a sufr ido algún tipo de caída. 15 . Uso de las pilas – PRECAUCIÓN: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas o daños en la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas cor rectamente , y - como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas ( viejas con nue vas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc .). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante lar go tiempo. EL 6475-S002: 01/3 SAFETY & MAINTENANCE INFORMA TION (See 8 ) • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs or cassettes to humidity , rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set overheating. • The mechanical parts of the set contain self-lubricating bearings and must not be oiled or lubricated. CD player and CD handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly , use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair . • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player . Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • Always close the CD-tape door to avoid dust on the lens. • T o clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. T ape deck maintenance T o ensure quality recording and playback of the tape deck, clean parts A , B and C as shown, once a month. Use a cotton bud slightly moistened with alcohol or a special head cleaning fluid to clean the deck. 1. Open the CD-tape door . 2. Press PLA Y 2 and clean the roller C . 3. Press PAUSE ; and clean the heads A, and the capstan B . 4. After cleaning, press STOP 9 . No sound /power – V olume not adjusted • Adjust the VOLUME – Power cord not securely connected • Connect the AC power cord properly – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Headphones connected to the set • Disconnect headphones Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV , VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM: Adjust the FM telescopic aerial noPr indication – During programming radio preset stations, you have keyed in a preset number that exceeds the maximum preset number i.e. 40 • Key in a preset number from 1-40 noCd indication – CD badly scratched or dirty • Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance – Laser lens steamed up • Wait until lens has cleared nFCd indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use a finalized CD-R(W) dAtA indication – CD contains non-audio files • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – SHUFFLE or PROGRAM is active • Switch off SHUFFLE / PROGRAM Poor cassette sound quality – Dust and dirt on the heads, etc. • Clean deck parts, see Maintenance – Use of incompatible cassette types (MET AL or CHROME) • Only use NORMAL (IEC I ) for recording Recording does not work – Cassette tab(s) may be broken • Apply adhesive tape over the missing tab space Remote control does not function properly (for AZ1505 model only) – Batteries dead/ incorrectly inserted • Insert (fresh) batteries correctly – Distance/ angle between the set too large • Reduce the distance/ angle 1. Read these instructions. 2. K eep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follo w all instructions. 5. Do not use this a pparatus near water . 6. Clean only with a dr y cloth. 7. Do not block any of the v entila- tion openings. Install in accor- dance with the manufactur ers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiator s, heat regis- ter s, stoves, or other appar atus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your saf ety . If the provided plug does not f it into your outlet, consult an electr ician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 . Protect the po wer cor d from being walked on or pinched, par ticular ly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified b y the manufacturer . 12 . Use only with a cart , stand, tripod, bracket, or table speci- fied b y the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a car t is used, use caution when moving the car t/appara- tus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . 13 . Unplug this apparatus during light- ning storms or when unused for long periods of time . 14 . Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice per sonnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as if the power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the appar atus, or when the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture , does not operate nor mally , or has been dropped. 15 . Batter y usag e CAUTION – T o prevent batter y leakage which may result in bodily injur y or damage to the unit: ● Install all batter ies cor rectly , and - as mar ked on the unit. ● Do not mix batteries ( old and new or carbon and alkaline , etc .). ● Remo ve batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. EL 6475-E002: 01/3 ACCESSORIES 1 x AC power cord 1 x Remote Control (for AZ1505 model only) TOP AND FRONT P ANEL (See 1 ) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - to adjust volume level. 2 DBB ( D ynamic B ass B oost) - activates a more vivid bass response. 3 POWER slider - selects T APE/ RADIO / CD func- tion and also the power off switch ( T APE/ OFF ). 4 BAND - selects waveband. 5 0-9: - digit panel CD: - track selection and direct playback; RADIO: - selecting a preset station. 6 PROGRAM CD: - programs tracks and reviews the program; T uner: - programs preset radio stations. 7 SEARCH ∞ , § CD: - searches backward and forward within a track; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previ- ous/ later track. RADIO: - (down, up) tunes to radio stations. 8 MODE - selects different play modes: e.g. REPEA T or SHUFFLE (random) order . 9 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 0 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. ! Display - shows the status of the set. @ LIFT TO OPEN - lift here to open CD-tape door . # REMOTE SENSOR - (for AZ1505 model only) infrared sensor for remote control. $ CASSETTE RECORDER keys: RECORD 0 - to start recording. PLA Y 2 - to start playback. SEARCH 5 / 6 - fast rewinds/ winds tape. STOP 9 - stops tape. P AUSE ; - pauses playback or recording. BACK P ANEL % T elescopic antenna - improves FM reception. ^ p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. & AC MAINS - inlet for power cord. * Battery compartment - for 6 batteries, type R-14 , UM2 or C-cells . REMOTE CONTROL (for AZ1505 model only) 1 VOLUME 3 , 4 - adjusts volume level. 2 SHUFFLE - plays all CD tracks in random order . 3 2; - starts or pauses CD playback. 4 SEARCH 5 , 6 - searches backwards/ forwards within a track. 5 PRESET , - (up, down) - selects a preset radio station. 6 TUNING ∞ , § (down, up) - tunes to tuner stations. 7 9 - to stop playback; - erases a CD program. 8 ¡ , ™ - skips to the beginning of a current track previous/ subsequent track. 9 REPEA T - repeats a track /program/ entire CD. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. POWER SUPPL Y Whenever convenient, use the AC power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power plug from the set and wall outlet before inserting batteries. Batteries (not included) • Insert 6 batteries, type R-14, UM-2 or C-cells , (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity . (See 7 ) • Remote control (AZ1505 model only) Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). (See 9 ) IMPORT ANT! • Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly . Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply , as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set , corresponds to your local power supply . If it does not, consult your dealer or service center . 2. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. 3. T o disconnect the power supply , unplug the set from the wall outlet. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Switching on and off and selecting function 1. T o switch on, adjust the POWER slider to select: CD , RADIO or T APE function, and operate the respective function controls. 2. T o switch off, adjust the POWER slider to select T APE/OFF and make sure all the cassette keys are released. Note : The DBB setting, tuner presets and the volume will be retained in the set's memory . Adjusting volume and sound (See 2 ) 1. Press the VOLUME 3 or 4 controls to adjust the volume. 2. Press DBB once or more to select dynamic bass boost on or off. DIGIT AL TUNER T uning to radio stations 1. Adjust the POWER slider to RADIO . ™ tu is displayed briefly and then the radio station frequency , waveband and, if pro- grammed, a preset number are shown. (See 3 ) 2. Press BAND once or more to select your wave- band. 3. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § until the frequency in the display starts running. ™ The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows Srch during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. T o tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § briefly and repeatedly until you have found optimal reception. T o improve radio reception: • For FM , extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM , the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. Programming radio stations Y ou can store up to a total of 40 radio stations in the memory , manually or automatically (Autostore). Manual programming 1. T une to your desired station (see T uning to radio stations). 2. Press PROGRAM to activate programming. ™ Display: Pr -- and PROG flashes. 3. Use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. E.g. press 1,1 if you want to store your station as preset 11. (See 4 ) • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): Press PRESET / - once or more to select a preset station. 4. Press PROGRAM to confirm. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 to store other stations. Note : Y ou can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. IMPOR T ANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS English CONTROL/POWER SUPPL Y 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conser vez ces instructions. 3. Respectez les av er tissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N’utilisez pas cet appareil à pr ox- imité d’une source d’eau. 6. Nettoy ez l’appareil uniquement a vec un chiffon sec. 7. N’obstruez aucun orifice de venti- lation. Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du fabricant. 8. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de chaleur comme par exemple des radiateur s, bouches de chaleur , cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur . 9. Ne détruisez pas la incorporée dans la prise de ter re ou prise polar isée fournie . Une pr ise polar isée est dotée de deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre . Une pr ise de ter re est dotée de deux fiches semb lables et d’une troisième , plus lar ge , qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre sécur ité. Si la pr ise fournie ne convient pas à la prise mur ale dont vous disposez, consultez un élec- tricien pour remplacer et adapter votre prise mur ale . 10 . Protég ez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter de marcher dessus ou de le pincer par ticulièrement aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même . 11. Utilisez uniquement des acces- soires ou options recommandés par le fabricant. 12 . Utilisez uniquement un meuble sur r oulettes ,u n suppor t, un pied, une étagère ou une table de type recom- mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer av ec précaution afin d’éviter tout accident corporel si l’équipement se renv er sait. 13 . Débranchez l’appar eil pendant les orages ou s’il doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps prolongée . 14 . P our toute réparation, faites appel à un per sonnel qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérior ation du cordon d’alimentation ou de la prise , liq- uide renv er sé sur l’appareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute . 15 . PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter toute fuite des piles qui risquer ait de causer des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager l’appareil : ● Installez toutes les piles cor rectement, et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves a vec des usagées ou de piles au carbone av ec des alcalines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période . EL 6475-F002: 01/3 Autostore Autostore automatically starts programming radio stations from preset 1. Available stations are programmed in order of waveband reception strength: FM, followed by AM. Any previous presets e.g. manually programmed will be erased. • Press PROGRAM for 4 seconds or more to activate autostore programming. ™ The display shows AUtO , PROG blinks, followed by the radio station details when stored. After all stations are stored, the first preset station will then automatically play . T o listen to a preset station • Direct Easy Access: use the digit panel on the set to key in a number , 1-40, to select a preset station. • Remote control ( AZ1505 models only): optionally , press PRESET , - to select your preset station. CD PLA YER Playing a CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD- Recordables and CD-Rewritables. 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and close the door . ™ noCd if no CD inserted/ CD dirty , incorrectly inserted or damaged. ™ nFCd if you have inserted a non-finalized CD- R(W). 3. Press 2; to start playback. ™ dAtA if your CD contains non-audio i.e. data files. 4. T o pause playback press 2; . Press 2; again to resume play . ™ Display: 2 flashes during pause. 5. T o stop CD playback, press the 9 button. Note : CD play will also stop when: - the CD-tape door is opened - the CD has reached the end - you select T APE or RADIO function. Selecting a different track There are 2 ways: Direct Easy Access • Key in the number of the track using the digit panel on the set. SEARCH ∞ or § • Press SEARCH ∞ or § once or repeatedly to select your track. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § . – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or § to resume normal playback. Note : During a CD program or if SHUFFLE/ REPEA T active, searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEA T Y ou can select and change the various play modes before or during playback, and combine the modes with PROGRAM. (See 5 ) SHUFFLE - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order SHUFFLE REPEA T ALL - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order REPEA T ALL - repeats the entire CD/ program REPEA T - plays the current track continuously 1. T o select play mode, press MODE once or more. 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. 3. T o select normal playback, press MODE repeated- ly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – Y ou can also press the 9 button to cancel your play mode. Programming track numbers In the stop position, select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory . 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number . 2. Press PROGRAM . ™ Display: PROG, Pr and your selected track number . (See 6 ) ™ If you attempt to program without first selecting a track number , noSE is shown. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: FULL if you try to program more than 20 tracks. Reviewing the program In the stop position, press and hold PROGRAM until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. Erasing a program Y ou can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice ™ CLr is displayed briefly and PROG disappears. • Y ou select T APE or RADIO function. CASSETTE RECORDER Cassette playback 1. Adjust the POWER slider to T APE . 2. Insert a cassette as shown and close the door . 3. Press 2 to start playback. ™ Display: shows tAPE throughout tape operation. 4. T o pause playback press P AUSE ; . Press again to resume. 5. Press SEARCH 5 or 6 to fast wind the tape. 6. T o stop the tape, press STOP 9 . The keys are automatically released at the end of a tape and the set switched off, except if P AUSE ; has been activated. General information on recording • Recording is permissible insofar as copyright or . other rights of third parties are not infringed. • For recording, use only NORMAL type cassettes (IEC type I) on which the tabs have not yet been broken. This deck is not suited for recording on CHROME (IEC II ) or MET AL (IEC IV) type cassettes. • The best recording level is set automatically . Altering the VOLUME or DBB controls will not affect the recording. • T o protect a tape from accidental erasure, break out the tabs. If you wish to record again, cover the tabs with a piece of adhesive tape. CD Synchro Start Recording 1. Adjust the POWER slider to CD . 2. Insert a CD and if desired, program track numbers. 3. Insert a suitable tape into the cassette deck and close the door . 4. Press RECORD 0 to start recording. – Playing of the CD program starts automatically from the beginning of the program. Y ou don't need to start the CD player separately . ™ T o select and record a particular passage within a CD track: • Press SEARCH ∞ or § . Release the control when you recognize the passage you want. • T o pause CD playback, press 2; . • Recording starts from this exact point in the track when you press RECORD 0 . 5. T o pause recording, press P AUSE ; . Press P AUSE ; again to resume recording. 6. T o stop recording, press STOP 9 . Recording from the Radio 1. T une to the desired radio station (see T uning to radio stations ). 2. Follow steps 3-6, under CD Synchro Start Recording . CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPOR T ANTES DIGIT AL TUNER CD PLA YER CD PLA YER CASSETTE RECORDER INSTRUCCIONES IMPOR T ANTES DE SEGURID AD CASSETTE RECORDER SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPL Y DIGIT AL TUNER PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMP ANY A Division of Philips Electronics Nor th Amer ica Cor por ation Knoxville, T ennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Meet Philips at the Internet http://www .philipsusa.com Audio Audio CD Soundmachine AZ 1500 • AZ 1505 Read this manual first! Congratulations on purchasing this Philips product. W e’ve included everything you need to get star ted. If you have any problems, Philips Representatives can help you get the most from your ne w product b y explaining: • Hookups, • First Time Setup, and • Feature Oper ation. Do not attempt to return this product to the stor e. For f ast help, call us fir st! 1-800-531-0039 Thank you for making Philips a part of your home! S E E W H Y I N S I D E I M P O R T A N T ! Return your W arranty Registration Car d within 10 days Printed in Hong K ong W CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AZ 1500 AZ 1505 3140 115 2895.1 English Français Español Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials: cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Y our set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company . Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, dead batteries and old equipment. If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair . If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service centre. W ARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock. Under no circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty . Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only A C P olarized Plug Prise polarisée C. A. English : This digital appar atus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Depar tment of Communications. Français : Cet appareil numér ique n'émet pas de br uits r adioélectr iques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Canada A A B C X DBB 2 AM 3 8 FM PROG 4 DBB PROG SHUFFLE 5 PROG 6 7 9 Cla vija polarizada de CA The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the f ollowing two conditions: 1. This de vice may not cause har mful interference, and 2. This de vice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. L ’appareil répond aux normes FCC , P ar t 15 et 21 CFR 1040.10. Fonctionnement soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compr is les interférences susceptibles de provoquer un f onctionement peu satisfaisant. El aparato cumple las normas FCC , Parte 15 y 21 CFR 1040.10. Funcionamiento dependiente de dos condiciones siguientes: 1. Este aparato no puede pro vocar interferencia dañina, y 2. Este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interf erencia recibida, incluyendo las interferencias que pueden pro vocar un funcionamiento insuficiente . VOLUME SEARCH PRESET TUNING REPEAT SHUFFLE SEARCH - 40 PRESET DIGITAL TUNER 1 9 8 6 7 2 4 3 5 & % ^ * 2 1 3 4 9 ! @ # $ 0 6 5 7 8 Remote Contr ol for AZ1505 model only 1 AZ1500/17 12/13/01 10:27 Page 1